blob: 08712655978f35d0ee86d1083cc2052c3cce2059 [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau9d4d9e32010-05-13 22:17:08 +02005 version 1.4.5
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau9d4d9e32010-05-13 22:17:08 +02007 2010/05/13
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200808force-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100809fullconn X - X X
810grace X X X X
811hash-type X - X X
812http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
813http-request - X X X
814id - X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200815ignore-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100816log X X X X
817maxconn X X X -
818mode X X X X
819monitor fail - X X -
820monitor-net X X X -
821monitor-uri X X X -
822option abortonclose (*) X - X X
823option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
824option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
825option allbackups (*) X - X X
826option checkcache (*) X - X X
827option clitcpka (*) X X X -
828option contstats (*) X X X -
829option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
830option dontlognull (*) X X X -
831option forceclose (*) X X X X
832-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
833option forwardfor X X X X
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +0200834option http-pretend-keepalive (*) X X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100835option http-server-close (*) X X X X
836option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
837option httpchk X - X X
838option httpclose (*) X X X X
839option httplog X X X X
840option http_proxy (*) X X X X
841option independant-streams (*) X X X X
842option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
843option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
844option logasap (*) X X X -
845option mysql-check X - X X
846option nolinger (*) X X X X
847option originalto X X X X
848option persist (*) X - X X
849option redispatch (*) X - X X
850option smtpchk X - X X
851option socket-stats (*) X X X -
852option splice-auto (*) X X X X
853option splice-request (*) X X X X
854option splice-response (*) X X X X
855option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
856option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
857-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
858option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
859option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
860option tcpka X X X X
861option tcplog X X X X
862option transparent (*) X - X X
863persist rdp-cookie X - X X
864rate-limit sessions X X X -
865redirect - X X X
866redisp (deprecated) X - X X
867redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
868reqadd - X X X
869reqallow - X X X
870reqdel - X X X
871reqdeny - X X X
872reqiallow - X X X
873reqidel - X X X
874reqideny - X X X
875reqipass - X X X
876reqirep - X X X
877reqisetbe - X X X
878reqitarpit - X X X
879reqpass - X X X
880reqrep - X X X
881-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
882reqsetbe - X X X
883reqtarpit - X X X
884retries X - X X
885rspadd - X X X
886rspdel - X X X
887rspdeny - X X X
888rspidel - X X X
889rspideny - X X X
890rspirep - X X X
891rsprep - X X X
892server - - X X
893source X - X X
894srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
895stats auth X - X X
896stats enable X - X X
897stats hide-version X - X X
898stats realm X - X X
899stats refresh X - X X
900stats scope X - X X
901stats show-desc X - X X
902stats show-legends X - X X
903stats show-node X - X X
904stats uri X - X X
905-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
906stick match - - X X
907stick on - - X X
908stick store-request - - X X
909stick-table - - X X
910tcp-request content accept - X X -
911tcp-request content reject - X X -
912tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
913timeout check X - X X
914timeout client X X X -
915timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
916timeout connect X - X X
917timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
918timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
919timeout http-request X X X X
920timeout queue X - X X
921timeout server X - X X
922timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
923timeout tarpit X X X X
924transparent (deprecated) X - X X
925use_backend - X X -
926------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
927 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200928
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100929
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009304.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
931---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100932
933This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
934
935
936acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
937 Declare or complete an access list.
938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
939 no | yes | yes | yes
940 Example:
941 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
942 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
943 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
944
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200945 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100946
947
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100948appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
949 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100950 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
951 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
952 no | no | yes | yes
953 Arguments :
954 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
955 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
956
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100957 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100958 checked in each cookie value.
959
960 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
961 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
962 milliseconds.
963
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200964 request-learn
965 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
966 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
967 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
968 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
969 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
970 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
971
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100972 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
973 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
974 data following this prefix.
975
976 Example :
977 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
978
979 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
980 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
981
982 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
983 2 modes are currently supported :
984 - path-parameters :
985 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
986 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
987 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
988 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
989 - query-string :
990 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
991 query string.
992
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100993 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
994 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
995 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
996 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100997 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
998 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
999 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001000 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
1001 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1002
1003 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1004
1005 Example :
1006 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1007
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001008 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick", "stick-table"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001009 and "ignore-persist"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001010
1011
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001012backlog <conns>
1013 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1014 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1015 yes | yes | yes | no
1016 Arguments :
1017 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1018 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1019 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1020
1021 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1022 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1023 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1024 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1025 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1026 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1027 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1028 backlog parameter.
1029
1030 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1031 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1032 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1033
1034 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1035
1036
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001037balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001038balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001039 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1040 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1041 yes | no | yes | yes
1042 Arguments :
1043 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1044 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1045 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1046 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1047
1048 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1049 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1050 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1051 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001052 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1053 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1054 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1055 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1056 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1057 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1058 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1059 it, so that you don't worry.
1060
1061 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1062 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1063 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1064 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1065 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1066 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1067 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1068 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001069
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001070 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1071 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1072 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1073 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1074 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1075 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1076 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1077 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1078
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001079 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1080 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1081 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1082 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1083 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1084 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1085 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1086 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001087 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001088 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001089 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1090 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1091 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001092
1093 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1094 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1095 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1096 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1097 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1098 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1099 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001100 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1101 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1102 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001103
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001104 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1105 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1106 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1107 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1108 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1109 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1110 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1111 URIs start with a leading "/".
1112
1113 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1114 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1115 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1116 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1117
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001118 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001119 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1120
1121 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1122 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1123 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1124 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1125 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1126 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1127 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1128 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1129 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1130 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1131 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1132 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1133 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1134 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1135 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1136 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1137 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1138 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1139 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1140 be randomly balanced if at all.
1141
1142 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1143 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1144 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1145 server will receive the request.
1146
1147 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1148 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1149 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1150 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1151 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001152 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1153 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1154 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001155
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001156 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1157 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1158 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001159 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001160 algorithm is applied instead.
1161
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001162 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001163 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1164 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1165 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1166
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001167 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1168 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1169 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1170
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001171 rdp-cookie
1172 rdp-cookie(name)
1173 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1174 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1175 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1176 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1177 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1178 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001179 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001180 used instead.
1181
1182 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1183 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1184 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1185 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1186
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001187 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1188 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1189 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1190
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001191 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001192 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1193 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001194
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001195 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001196 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001197
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001198 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1199 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1200 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001201
1202 Examples :
1203 balance roundrobin
1204 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001205 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001206 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1207 balance hdr(host)
1208 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001209
1210 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1211 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1212
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001213 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001214 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1215 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1216 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1217 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1218
1219 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1220 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1221 defaults to 16 kB.
1222
1223 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1224 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1225
1226 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1227 Round Robin.
1228
1229 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1230 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1231 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1232 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1233
1234 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1235
1236 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001237 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001238 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1239 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1240 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001241
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001242 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1243 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001244
1245
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001246bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...]
1247bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] interface <interface>
1248bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
1249bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] transparent
1250bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] id <id>
1251bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] name <name>
1252bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001253 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1254 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1255 no | yes | yes | no
1256 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001257 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1258 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1259 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1260 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1261 special address "0.0.0.0".
1262
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001263 <port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
1264 proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
1265 above. The port is mandatory. Note that in the case of an
1266 IPv6 address, the port is always the number after the last
1267 colon (':'). A range can either be :
1268 - a numerical port (ex: '80')
1269 - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
1270 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
1271 the range.
1272
1273 Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
1274 every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
1275 descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
1276 with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
1277 <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
1278 instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
1279 to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
1280 privileges to start the program, which are independant of
1281 the 'uid' parameter.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001282
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001283 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1284 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1285 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1286 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1287 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1288 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1289 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1290 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1291 privileges.
1292
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001293 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1294 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1295 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1296 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1297 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1298 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1299 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1300 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1301
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001302 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1303 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1304 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1305 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001306
1307 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1308
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001309 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1310 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1311 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001312 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001313 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1314 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1315 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1316 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1317 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001318
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001319 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1320 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1321 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1322 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1323 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1324 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1325 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1326 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1327 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1328 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1329 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1330 with front firewalls which would see an established
1331 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1332
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001333 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1334 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1335 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1336 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1337 in a frontend.
1338
1339 Example :
1340 listen http_proxy
1341 bind :80,:443
1342 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1343
1344 See also : "source".
1345
1346
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001347bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1348 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1350 yes | yes | yes | yes
1351 Arguments :
1352 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1353 may be used to override a default value.
1354
1355 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1356 option may be combined with other numbers.
1357
1358 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1359 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1360 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1361 missing from all processes.
1362
1363 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1364 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1365 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1366 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1367
1368 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1369 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1370 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1371 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1372 and 'even' instances.
1373
1374 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1375 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1376 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1377 32.
1378
1379 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1380 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1381
1382 Example :
1383 listen app_ip1
1384 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1385 bind_process odd
1386
1387 listen app_ip2
1388 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1389 bind_process even
1390
1391 listen management
1392 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1393 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1394
1395 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1396
1397
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001398block { if | unless } <condition>
1399 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1400 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1401 no | yes | yes | yes
1402
1403 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1404 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001405 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001406 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1407 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1408 "block" statements per instance.
1409
1410 Example:
1411 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1412 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1413 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1414 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1415
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001416 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001417
1418
1419capture cookie <name> len <length>
1420 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1421 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1422 no | yes | yes | no
1423 Arguments :
1424 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1425 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1426 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1427 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1428 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1429
1430 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1431 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1432 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1433 right if it exceeds <length>.
1434
1435 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1436 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1437 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1438 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1439
1440 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1441 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1442 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1443
1444 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1445 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1446 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1447 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001448 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001449 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1450
1451 Example:
1452 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1453
1454 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001455 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001456
1457
1458capture request header <name> len <length>
1459 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1460 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1461 no | yes | yes | no
1462 Arguments :
1463 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001464 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001465 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1466 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1467 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1468
1469 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1470 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1471 it exceeds <length>.
1472
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001473 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001474 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1475 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001476 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1477 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1478 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1479 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001480 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001481 environments to find where the request came from.
1482
1483 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1484 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1485 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1486 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001487
1488 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1489 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1490 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1491 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1492
1493 Example:
1494 capture request header Host len 15
1495 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1496 capture request header Referrer len 15
1497
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001498 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001499 about logging.
1500
1501
1502capture response header <name> len <length>
1503 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1504 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1505 no | yes | yes | no
1506 Arguments :
1507 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001508 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001509 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1510 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1511 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1512
1513 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1514 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1515 it exceeds <length>.
1516
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001517 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001518 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1519 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1520 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001521 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1522 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1523 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1524 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001525
1526 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1527 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1528 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1529 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1530
1531 Example:
1532 capture response header Content-length len 9
1533 capture response header Location len 15
1534
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001535 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001536 about logging.
1537
1538
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001539clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001540 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1541 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1542 yes | yes | yes | no
1543 Arguments :
1544 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1545 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1546 as explained at the top of this document.
1547
1548 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1549 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1550 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1551 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1552 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1553 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1554 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1555 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001556 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001557 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1558 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1559
1560 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1561 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1562 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1563 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1564 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1565 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1566
1567 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1568 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1569
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001570 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1571 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001572
1573
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001574contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001575 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1576 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1577 yes | no | yes | yes
1578 Arguments :
1579 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1580 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1581 as explained at the top of this document.
1582
1583 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001584 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001585 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001586 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1587 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1588 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1589 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1590
1591 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1592 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1593 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1594 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1595 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1596 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1597
1598 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1599 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1600 instead.
1601
1602 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1603 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1604
1605
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001606cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001607 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001608 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1609 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1610 yes | no | yes | yes
1611 Arguments :
1612 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1613 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1614 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1615 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1616 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1617 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1618 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1619 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1620 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1621
1622 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1623 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1624 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1625 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1626 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1627 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1628 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1629 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1630 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1631 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1632 "insert" and "prefix".
1633
1634 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1635 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1636 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1637 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1638 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1639 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1640 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1641 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1642 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1643
1644 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1645 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1646 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1647 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1648 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1649 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1650 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1651 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1652 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1653 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1654 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1655
1656 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1657 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1658 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1659 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1660 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1661 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1662 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1663 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1664 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1665 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1666
1667 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1668 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1669 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1670 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1671 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1672 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1673 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1674 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1675 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1676
1677 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1678 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1679 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1680 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1681 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1682 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1683 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1684 persistence cookie in the cache.
1685 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1686
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001687 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001688 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001689 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1690 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1691 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1692 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1693 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1694 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001695
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001696 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1697 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1698 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1699 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001700
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001701 Examples :
1702 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1703 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1704 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1705
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001706 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001707 and "ignore-persist".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001708
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001709
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001710default-server [param*]
1711 Change default options for a server in a backend
1712 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1713 yes | no | yes | yes
1714 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001715 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1716 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1717 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1718 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001719
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001720 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001721 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1722
1723 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001724
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001725
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001726default_backend <backend>
1727 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1728 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1729 yes | yes | yes | no
1730 Arguments :
1731 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1732
1733 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1734 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1735 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1736 will catch all undetermined requests.
1737
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001738 Example :
1739
1740 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1741 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1742 default_backend dynamic
1743
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001744 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1745
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001746
1747disabled
1748 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1749 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1750 yes | yes | yes | yes
1751 Arguments : none
1752
1753 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1754 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1755 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1756 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1757 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1758 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1759 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1760
1761 See also : "enabled"
1762
1763
1764enabled
1765 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1766 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1767 yes | yes | yes | yes
1768 Arguments : none
1769
1770 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1771 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1772
1773 See also : "disabled"
1774
1775
1776errorfile <code> <file>
1777 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1778 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1779 yes | yes | yes | yes
1780 Arguments :
1781 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1782 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1783
1784 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001785 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001786 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001787 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1788 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001789
1790 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1791 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1792 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1793
1794 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1795 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1796 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1797 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1798
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001799 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1800 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1801 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1802 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1803 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1804 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1805
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001806 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1807 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1808 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001809 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001810 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1811
1812 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1813
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001814 Example :
1815 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1816 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1817 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1818
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001819
1820errorloc <code> <url>
1821errorloc302 <code> <url>
1822 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1823 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1824 yes | yes | yes | yes
1825 Arguments :
1826 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1827 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1828
1829 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1830 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1831 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1832 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1833 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1834
1835 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1836 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1837 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1838
1839 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1840 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1841 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1842 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1843 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1844 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1845 request.
1846
1847 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1848
1849
1850errorloc303 <code> <url>
1851 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1852 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1853 yes | yes | yes | yes
1854 Arguments :
1855 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1856 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1857
1858 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1859 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1860 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1861 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1862 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1863
1864 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1865 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1866 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1867
1868 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1869 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1870 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1871 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001872 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001873
1874 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1875
1876
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001877force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1878 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1879 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1880 no | yes | yes | yes
1881
1882 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1883 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1884 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1885 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1886 marked down for maintenance operations.
1887
1888 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1889 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1890 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1891 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1892 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1893 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1894 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1895 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1896 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1897
1898 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1899 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1900 is used.
1901
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001902 See also : "option redispatch", "ignore-persist", "persist",
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001903 and section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001904
1905
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001906fullconn <conns>
1907 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1908 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1909 yes | no | yes | yes
1910 Arguments :
1911 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1912 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1913
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001914 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001915 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001916 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001917 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1918 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1919 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1920 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1921 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001922 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001923
1924 Example :
1925 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1926 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1927 # connections.
1928 backend dynamic
1929 fullconn 10000
1930 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1931 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1932
1933 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1934
1935
1936grace <time>
1937 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001939 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001940 Arguments :
1941 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1942 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1943 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1944
1945 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1946 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001947 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001948 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1949
1950 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1951 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1952 simplify it.
1953
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001954
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001955hash-type <method>
1956 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1957 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1958 yes | no | yes | yes
1959 Arguments :
1960 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1961 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1962 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1963 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1964 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1965 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1966 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1967 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1968 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1969
1970 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1971 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1972 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1973 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1974 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1975 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1976 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1977 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1978 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1979 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1980 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1981 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1982 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1983
1984 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1985
1986 See also : "balance", "server"
1987
1988
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001989http-check disable-on-404
1990 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1991 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001992 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001993 Arguments : none
1994
1995 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1996 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1997 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1998 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1999 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
2000 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
2001 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
2002 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
2003 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
2004
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002005 See also : "option httpchk"
2006
2007
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002008http-check send-state
2009 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
2010 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2011 yes | no | yes | yes
2012 Arguments : none
2013
2014 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
2015 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
2016 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
2017 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
2018 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2019
2020 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2021 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2022 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2023 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2024 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2025 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2026 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2027 checked in multiple backends.
2028
2029 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2030 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2031
2032 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2033 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2034 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2035 one fails.
2036
2037 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2038 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2039 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2040
2041 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2042 server's queue.
2043
2044 Example of a header received by the application server :
2045 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2046 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2047
2048 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2049
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002050http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2051 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002052 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2053
2054 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2055 no | yes | yes | yes
2056
2057 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2058 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2059 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2060 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2061 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2062 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2063
2064 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2065 instance.
2066
2067 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002068 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2069 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2070 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002071
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002072 http-request allow if nagios
2073 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2074 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2075 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002076
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002077 Example:
2078 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002079
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002080 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002081
2082 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002083
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002084id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002085 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2086 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2087 no | yes | yes | yes
2088 Arguments : none
2089
2090 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2091 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2092 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002093
2094
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02002095ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
2096 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
2097 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2098 no | yes | yes | yes
2099
2100 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
2101 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
2102 and running).
2103
2104 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
2105 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
2106 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
2107 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
2108 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
2109
2110 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
2111 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
2112
2113 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
2114 "unless" condition is met.
2115
2116 See also : "force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
2117
2118
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002119log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002120log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002121 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2122 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2123 yes | yes | yes | yes
2124 Arguments :
2125 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2126 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2127 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2128 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2129 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2130 parameter.
2131
2132 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2133 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2134
2135 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2136 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2137 standard syslog port).
2138
2139 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2140 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2141 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2142 appropriately writeable).
2143
2144 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2145
2146 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2147 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2148 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2149
2150 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2151 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2152 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002153 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2154 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2155 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2156 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2157 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002158
2159 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2160
2161 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2162 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2163 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2164
2165 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002166 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2167 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2168 "info".
2169
2170 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2171 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2172 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2173 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2174
2175 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2176 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002177
2178 Example :
2179 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002180 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2181 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002182
2183
2184maxconn <conns>
2185 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2186 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2187 yes | yes | yes | no
2188 Arguments :
2189 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2190 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2191 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2192 closes.
2193
2194 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2195 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2196 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2197 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2198 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2199 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2200 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2201 properly tuned.
2202
2203 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2204 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2205 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2206
2207 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2208
2209
2210mode { tcp|http|health }
2211 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2212 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2213 yes | yes | yes | yes
2214 Arguments :
2215 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2216 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2217 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2218 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2219
2220 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2221 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2222 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2223 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2224 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2225
2226 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2227 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2228 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2229 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2230 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2231 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2232
2233 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2234 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2235 will be refused.
2236
2237 Example :
2238 defaults http_instances
2239 mode http
2240
2241 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2242
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002243
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002244monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002245 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002246 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2247 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002248 Arguments :
2249 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2250 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002251 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002252 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2253 backend and its backup.
2254
2255 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2256 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2257 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2258 servers in a list of backends.
2259
2260 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2261 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2262 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2263 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2264 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2265 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2266 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002267 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002268
2269 Example:
2270 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002271 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002272 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2273 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2274 monitor-uri /site_alive
2275 monitor fail if site_dead
2276
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002277 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2278
2279
2280monitor-net <source>
2281 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2282 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2283 yes | yes | yes | no
2284 Arguments :
2285 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2286 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2287 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2288 followed by a mask.
2289
2290 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2291 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002292 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002293 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2294
2295 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2296 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2297 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2298 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2299 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2300
2301 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2302 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2303 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2304 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2305 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2306
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002307 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2308 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2309
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002310 Example :
2311 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2312 frontend www
2313 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2314
2315 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2316
2317
2318monitor-uri <uri>
2319 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2320 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2321 yes | yes | yes | no
2322 Arguments :
2323 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2324 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2325
2326 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2327 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2328 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2329 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2330 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2331 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2332 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2333 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2334
2335 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2336 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2337 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2338 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2339 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2340 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2341
2342 Example :
2343 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2344 frontend www
2345 mode http
2346 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2347
2348 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2349
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002350
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002351option abortonclose
2352no option abortonclose
2353 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2354 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2355 yes | no | yes | yes
2356 Arguments : none
2357
2358 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2359 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2360 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2361 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002362 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002363 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2364 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2365 encountered while delivering the response.
2366
2367 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2368 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2369 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2370 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2371 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2372 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002373 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002374 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002375 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002376 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2377 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2378 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2379
2380 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2381 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2382 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2383 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2384 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2385 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2386 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2387 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002388 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002389
2390 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2391 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2392
2393 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2394
2395
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002396option accept-invalid-http-request
2397no option accept-invalid-http-request
2398 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2399 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2400 yes | yes | yes | no
2401 Arguments : none
2402
2403 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2404 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2405 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2406 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2407 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2408 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2409 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2410 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2411 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2412
2413 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2414 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2415 been confirmed.
2416
2417 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2418 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2419 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2420 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2421
2422 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2423 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2424
2425 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2426 stats socket.
2427
2428
2429option accept-invalid-http-response
2430no option accept-invalid-http-response
2431 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2432 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2433 yes | no | yes | yes
2434 Arguments : none
2435
2436 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2437 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2438 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2439 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2440 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2441 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2442 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2443 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2444 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2445
2446 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2447 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2448 been confirmed.
2449
2450 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2451 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2452 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2453 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2454
2455 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2456 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2457
2458 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2459 stats socket.
2460
2461
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002462option allbackups
2463no option allbackups
2464 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2465 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2466 yes | no | yes | yes
2467 Arguments : none
2468
2469 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2470 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2471 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2472 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2473 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2474 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2475 order between the backup servers anymore.
2476
2477 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2478 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2479
2480 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2481 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2482
2483
2484option checkcache
2485no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002486 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002487 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2488 yes | no | yes | yes
2489 Arguments : none
2490
2491 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2492 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002493 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002494 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2495 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2496 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2497
2498 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002499 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002500 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002501 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2502 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002503 to the client are :
2504 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002505 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002506 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002507 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2508 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2509 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2510 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2511 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2512 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2513 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2514 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2515 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2516 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2517 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2518
2519 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002520 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002521 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002522 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002523 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2524
2525 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2526 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002527 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002528 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2529
2530 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2531 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2532
2533
2534option clitcpka
2535no option clitcpka
2536 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2537 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2538 yes | yes | yes | no
2539 Arguments : none
2540
2541 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2542 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2543 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2544 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2545
2546 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2547 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2548 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2549 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2550
2551 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2552 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2553 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2554 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2555 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2556
2557 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2558
2559 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2560 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2561 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2562
2563 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2564 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2565
2566 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2567
2568
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002569option contstats
2570 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2571 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2572 yes | yes | yes | no
2573 Arguments : none
2574
2575 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2576 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2577 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2578 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2579 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2580 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2581 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2582
2583
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002584option dontlog-normal
2585no option dontlog-normal
2586 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2587 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2588 yes | yes | yes | no
2589 Arguments : none
2590
2591 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2592 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2593 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2594 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2595 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2596 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2597 logged.
2598
2599 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2600 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2601 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2602
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002603 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002604 logging.
2605
2606
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002607option dontlognull
2608no option dontlognull
2609 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2610 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2611 yes | yes | yes | no
2612 Arguments : none
2613
2614 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2615 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2616 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2617 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2618 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2619 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2620 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2621
2622 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2623 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2624 would not be logged.
2625
2626 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2627 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2628
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002629 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002630
2631
2632option forceclose
2633no option forceclose
2634 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2635 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002636 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002637 Arguments : none
2638
2639 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2640 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2641 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2642 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2643 global session times in the logs.
2644
2645 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002646 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002647 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2648 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2649 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2650 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002651
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002652 This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which
2653 will disable sending of the "Connection: close" header, but will still cause
2654 the connection to be closed once the whole response is received.
2655
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002656 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2657 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2658
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002659 See also : "option httpclose" and "option http-pretend-keepalive"
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002660
2661
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002662option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002663 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2664 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2665 yes | yes | yes | yes
2666 Arguments :
2667 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2668 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002669 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002670 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002671
2672 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2673 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2674 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2675 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2676 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2677 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2678 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002679 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2680 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2681 possible that the client has already brought one.
2682
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002683 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002684 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002685 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2686 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002687 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2688 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002689
2690 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2691 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2692 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2693 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2694 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2695 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2696 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2697
2698 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002699 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2700 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2701 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002702
2703 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2704 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2705 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2706 when using this option.
2707
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002708 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002709 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2710 frontend www
2711 mode http
2712 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2713
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002714 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2715 backend www
2716 mode http
2717 option forwardfor header X-Client
2718
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002719 See also : "option httpclose"
2720
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002721
2722option http-pretend-keepalive
2723no option http-pretend-keepalive
2724 Define whether haproxy will announce keepalive to the server or not
2725 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2726 yes | yes | yes | yes
2727 Arguments : none
2728
2729 When running with "option http-server-close" or "option forceclose", haproxy
2730 adds a "Connection: close" header to the request forwarded to the server.
2731 Unfortunately, when some servers see this header, they automatically refrain
2732 from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown length, while this
2733 is totally unrelated. The immediate effect is that this prevents haproxy from
2734 maintaining the client connection alive. A second effect is that a client or
2735 a cache could receive an incomplete response without being aware of it, and
2736 consider the response complete.
2737
2738 By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", haproxy will make the server
2739 believe it will keep the connection alive. The server will then not fall back
2740 to the abnormal undesired above. When haproxy gets the whole response, it
2741 will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
2742 "forceclose" option. That way the client gets a normal response and the
2743 connection is correctly closed on the server side.
2744
2745 It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers
2746 will more efficiently close the connection themselves after the last packet,
2747 and release its buffers slightly earlier. Also, the added packet on the
2748 network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it is
2749 worth noting that when this option is enabled, haproxy will have slightly
2750 less work to do. So if haproxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture,
2751 enabling this option might save a few CPU cycles.
2752
2753 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2754 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2755 This option has no effect if it is combined with "option httpclose", which
2756 has precedence.
2757
2758 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2759 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2760
2761 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
2762
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002763
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002764option http-server-close
2765no option http-server-close
2766 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2767 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2768 yes | yes | yes | yes
2769 Arguments : none
2770
2771 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2772 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2773 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2774 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2775 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2776 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002777 of RFC2616. Please note that some servers do not always conform to those
2778 requirements when they see "Connection: close" in the request. The effect
2779 will be that keep-alive will never be used. A workaround consists in enabling
2780 "option http-pretend-keepalive".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002781
2782 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2783 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2784 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2785 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002786 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2787 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002788
2789 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2790 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002791 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2792 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2793 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002794
2795 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2796 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2797
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002798 See also : "option forceclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive" and
2799 "option httpclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002800
2801
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002802option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002803no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002804 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2805 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2806 yes | yes | yes | no
2807 Arguments : none
2808
2809 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2810 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2811 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2812 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2813 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2814 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2815 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2816
2817 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2818 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2819 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2820 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2821 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2822 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2823 request along its whole life.
2824
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002825 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2826 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2827 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2828 front of an existing proxy.
2829
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002830 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2831
2832 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2833 http-server-close".
2834
2835
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002836option httpchk
2837option httpchk <uri>
2838option httpchk <method> <uri>
2839option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2840 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2841 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2842 yes | no | yes | yes
2843 Arguments :
2844 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2845 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2846 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2847 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2848 ones.
2849
2850 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2851 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2852 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2853
2854 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2855 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2856 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2857 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2858 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2859
2860 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2861 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2862 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2863 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2864 the lack of any response.
2865
2866 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2867
2868 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2869 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2870 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2871
2872 Examples :
2873 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2874 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2875 backend https_relay
2876 mode tcp
2877 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2878 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2879
2880 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2881 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2882
2883
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002884option httpclose
2885no option httpclose
2886 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2887 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2888 yes | yes | yes | yes
2889 Arguments : none
2890
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02002891 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yet support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002892 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2893 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2894 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2895 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2896 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2897 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2898 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2899 be removed.
2900
2901 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002902 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2903 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2904 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2905 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2906 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2907 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002908
2909 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2910 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2911 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002912 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2913 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002914
2915 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2916 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2917
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002918 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002919
2920
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002921option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002922 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2923 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2924 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002925 Arguments :
2926 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2927 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2928 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2929 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2930 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002931
2932 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2933 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2934 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2935 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2936 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2937 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2938 ports.
2939
2940 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2941
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002942 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2943 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2944 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2945 by default.
2946
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002947 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002948
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002949
2950option http_proxy
2951no option http_proxy
2952 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2953 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2954 yes | yes | yes | yes
2955 Arguments : none
2956
2957 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2958 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2959 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2960 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2961 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2962
2963 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2964 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2965 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2966 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2967 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2968 be analyzed.
2969
2970 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2971 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2972
2973 Example :
2974 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2975 backend direct_forward
2976 option httpclose
2977 option http_proxy
2978
2979 See also : "option httpclose"
2980
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002981
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02002982option ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
2983 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
2984 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2985 no | yes | yes | yes
2986
2987 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
2988 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
2989 and running).
2990
2991 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
2992 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
2993 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
2994 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
2995 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
2996
2997 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
2998 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
2999
3000 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
3001 "unless" condition is met.
3002
3003 See also : "option force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
3004
3005
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02003006option independant-streams
3007no option independant-streams
3008 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
3009 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3010 yes | yes | yes | yes
3011 Arguments : none
3012
3013 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
3014 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
3015 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
3016 receive data or not.
3017
3018 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
3019 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
3020 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
3021 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
3022 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
3023 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
3024 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
3025 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
3026 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
3027 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
3028 socket buffers.
3029
3030 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
3031 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
3032 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
3033 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
3034 slow lines, so use it with caution.
3035
3036 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
3037
3038
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02003039option log-health-checks
3040no option log-health-checks
3041 Enable or disable logging of health checks
3042 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3043 yes | no | yes | yes
3044 Arguments : none
3045
3046 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
3047 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
3048 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
3049 of additional information is limited.
3050
3051 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
3052 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
3053
3054 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
3055
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003056
3057option log-separate-errors
3058no option log-separate-errors
3059 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
3060 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3061 yes | yes | yes | no
3062 Arguments : none
3063
3064 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
3065 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
3066 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
3067 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
3068 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
3069 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
3070 provides very important information.
3071
3072 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
3073 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
3074 error logs.
3075
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003076 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003077 logging.
3078
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003079
3080option logasap
3081no option logasap
3082 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
3083 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3084 yes | yes | yes | no
3085 Arguments : none
3086
3087 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
3088 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
3089 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
3090 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
3091 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
3092 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
3093 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003094 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003095 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
3096 bytes are expected to be transferred.
3097
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01003098 Examples :
3099 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
3100 mode http
3101 option httplog
3102 option logasap
3103 log 192.168.2.200 local3
3104
3105 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
3106 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
3107 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
3108 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
3109
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003110 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003111 logging.
3112
3113
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01003114option mysql-check
3115 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
3116 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3117 yes | no | yes | yes
3118 Arguments : none
3119
3120 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3121 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3122 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3123 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3124 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3125
3126 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3127 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3128 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3129 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3130 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3131 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3132
3133 See also: "option httpchk"
3134
3135
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003136option nolinger
3137no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003138 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003139 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3140 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003141 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003142
3143 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3144 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3145 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3146 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3147 connections.
3148
3149 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3150 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3151 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3152 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3153 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3154 this too.
3155
3156 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3157 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3158 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3159
3160 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3161 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3162 for servers.
3163
3164 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3165 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3166
3167
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003168option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3169 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3170 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3171 yes | yes | yes | yes
3172 Arguments :
3173 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3174 matching <network>
3175 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3176 header name.
3177
3178 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3179 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3180 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3181 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3182 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3183 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3184 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3185 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3186 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3187 possible that the client has already brought one.
3188
3189 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3190 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3191 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3192 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3193 header and requires different one.
3194
3195 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3196 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3197 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3198 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3199 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3200 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3201 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3202
3203 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3204 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3205 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3206 both are defined.
3207
3208 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3209 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3210 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3211 when using this option.
3212
3213 Examples :
3214 # Original Destination address
3215 frontend www
3216 mode http
3217 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3218
3219 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3220 backend www
3221 mode http
3222 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3223
3224 See also : "option httpclose"
3225
3226
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003227option persist
3228no option persist
3229 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3230 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3231 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003232 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003233
3234 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3235 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3236 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3237 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3238 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3239 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3240 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3241 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3242 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3243 redirected to another valid server.
3244
3245 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3246 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3247
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003248 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003249
3250
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003251option redispatch
3252no option redispatch
3253 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3254 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3255 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003256 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003257
3258 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3259 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3260 be able to access the service anymore.
3261
3262 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3263 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3264
3265 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3266 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3267 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003268
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003269 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3270 "redisp" keywords.
3271
3272 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3273 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3274
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003275 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003276
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003277
3278option smtpchk
3279option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3280 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3281 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3282 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003283 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003284 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3285 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3286 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3287
3288 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3289 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3290 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3291
3292 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3293 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3294 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3295 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3296 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3297 dead server.
3298
3299 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3300 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3301 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3302 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3303
3304 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3305 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3306 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3307 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3308 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3309
3310 Example :
3311 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3312
3313 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3314
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003315
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003316option socket-stats
3317no option socket-stats
3318
3319 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3320 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3321 yes | yes | yes | no
3322
3323 Arguments : none
3324
3325
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003326option splice-auto
3327no option splice-auto
3328 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3329 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3330 yes | yes | yes | yes
3331 Arguments : none
3332
3333 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3334 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3335 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3336 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003337 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003338 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3339 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3340 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3341 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3342
3343 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3344 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3345 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3346 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3347 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3348 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3349 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3350 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3351 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3352 keyword.
3353
3354 Example :
3355 option splice-auto
3356
3357 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3358 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3359
3360 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3361 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3362
3363
3364option splice-request
3365no option splice-request
3366 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3367 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3368 yes | yes | yes | yes
3369 Arguments : none
3370
3371 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3372 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3373 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3374 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3375 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3376 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3377
3378 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3379
3380 Example :
3381 option splice-request
3382
3383 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3384 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3385
3386 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3387 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3388
3389
3390option splice-response
3391no option splice-response
3392 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3393 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3394 yes | yes | yes | yes
3395 Arguments : none
3396
3397 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3398 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3399 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3400 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3401 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3402 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3403
3404 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3405
3406 Example :
3407 option splice-response
3408
3409 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3410 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3411
3412 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3413 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3414
3415
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003416option srvtcpka
3417no option srvtcpka
3418 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3419 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3420 yes | no | yes | yes
3421 Arguments : none
3422
3423 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3424 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3425 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3426 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3427
3428 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3429 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3430 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3431 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3432
3433 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3434 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3435 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3436 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3437 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3438
3439 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3440
3441 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3442 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3443 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3444
3445 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3446 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3447
3448 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3449
3450
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003451option ssl-hello-chk
3452 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3453 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3454 yes | no | yes | yes
3455 Arguments : none
3456
3457 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3458 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3459 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3460 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3461 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3462 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3463 hello message.
3464
3465 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3466 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3467 messages, which is appreciable.
3468
3469 See also: "option httpchk"
3470
3471
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003472option tcp-smart-accept
3473no option tcp-smart-accept
3474 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3475 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3476 yes | yes | yes | no
3477 Arguments : none
3478
3479 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3480 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3481 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3482 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3483 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3484 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3485
3486 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3487 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3488 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3489 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3490
3491 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3492 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3493 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3494 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3495
3496 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3497 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3498 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3499
3500 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3501 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3502 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3503
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003504 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3505
3506
3507option tcp-smart-connect
3508no option tcp-smart-connect
3509 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3510 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3511 yes | no | yes | yes
3512 Arguments : none
3513
3514 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3515 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3516 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3517 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3518 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3519
3520 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3521 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3522 complex.
3523
3524 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3525 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3526 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3527
3528 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3529 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3530
3531 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3532
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003533
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003534option tcpka
3535 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3536 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3537 yes | yes | yes | yes
3538 Arguments : none
3539
3540 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3541 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3542 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3543 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3544
3545 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3546 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3547 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3548 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3549
3550 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3551 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3552 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3553 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3554 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3555
3556 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3557
3558 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3559 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3560 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3561 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3562 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3563 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3564 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3565 backends.
3566
3567 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3568
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003569
3570option tcplog
3571 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3572 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3573 yes | yes | yes | yes
3574 Arguments : none
3575
3576 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3577 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3578 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3579 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3580 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3581 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3582 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3583 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3584
3585 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3586
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003587 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003588
3589
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003590option transparent
3591no option transparent
3592 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3593 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003594 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003595 Arguments : none
3596
3597 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3598 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3599 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3600 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3601 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3602 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3603 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3604 appropriate server.
3605
3606 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3607 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3608
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003609 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3610 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003611
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003612
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003613persist rdp-cookie
3614persist rdp-cookie(name)
3615 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3616 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3617 yes | no | yes | yes
3618 Arguments :
3619 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3620 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3621 no valid reason to change this name.
3622
3623 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3624 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3625 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3626 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3627 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3628 forwarded to this server.
3629
3630 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3631 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3632 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003633 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003634 a single "listen" section.
3635
3636 Example :
3637 listen tse-farm
3638 bind :3389
3639 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3640 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3641 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3642 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3643 persist rdp-cookie
3644 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3645 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3646 balance rdp-cookie
3647 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3648 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3649
3650 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3651
3652
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003653rate-limit sessions <rate>
3654 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3655 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3656 yes | yes | yes | no
3657 Arguments :
3658 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3659 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3660
3661 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3662 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3663 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3664 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3665 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3666 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3667
3668 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3669 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3670 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3671 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3672
3673 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3674 listen smtp
3675 mode tcp
3676 bind :25
3677 rate-limit sessions 10
3678 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3679
3680 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3681 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3682
3683 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3684
3685
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003686redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3687redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003688 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3689 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3690 no | yes | yes | yes
3691
3692 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003693 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003694
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003695 Arguments :
3696 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3697 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3698 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3699 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003700 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3701 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3702 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3703 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003704
3705 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3706 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3707 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3708 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3709 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3710 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3711 location with a GET method.
3712
3713 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3714 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3715
3716 - "drop-query"
3717 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3718 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3719 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3720 with a location-type redirect.
3721
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003722 - "append-slash"
3723 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3724 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3725 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3726 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3727
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003728 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3729 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3730 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3731 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3732 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3733 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3734 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3735
3736 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3737 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3738 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3739 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3740 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3741 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3742 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003743
3744 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3745 acl clear dst_port 80
3746 acl secure dst_port 8080
3747 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003748 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003749 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003750 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3751
3752 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003753 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3754 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3755 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003756 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003757
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003758 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3759 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3760 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3761
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003762 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003763
3764
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003765redisp (deprecated)
3766redispatch (deprecated)
3767 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3768 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3769 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003770 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003771
3772 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3773 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3774 be able to access the service anymore.
3775
3776 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3777 redistribute them to a working server.
3778
3779 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3780 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3781 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003782
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003783 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3784 "option redispatch" instead.
3785
3786 See also : "option redispatch"
3787
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003788
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003789reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003790 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3791 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3792 no | yes | yes | yes
3793 Arguments :
3794 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3795 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003796 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003797
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003798 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3799 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3800
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003801 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3802 the last header of an HTTP request.
3803
3804 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3805 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3806 responses.
3807
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003808 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3809 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3810 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3811
3812 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3813 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003814
3815
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003816reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3817reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003818 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3819 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3820 no | yes | yes | yes
3821 Arguments :
3822 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3823 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3824 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3825 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3826 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3827 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3828 ignores case.
3829
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003830 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3831 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3832
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003833 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3834 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3835 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3836 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003837 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003838
3839 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3840 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3841
3842 Example :
3843 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3844 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3845 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3846
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003847 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3848 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003849
3850
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003851reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3852reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003853 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3854 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3855 no | yes | yes | yes
3856 Arguments :
3857 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3858 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3859 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3860 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3861 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3862 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3863
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003864 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3865 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3866
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003867 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3868 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3869 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3870 next servers.
3871
3872 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3873 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3874 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3875
3876 Example :
3877 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3878 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3879 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3880
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003881 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3882 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003883
3884
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003885reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3886reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003887 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3888 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3889 no | yes | yes | yes
3890 Arguments :
3891 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3892 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3893 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3894 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3895 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3896 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3897 case.
3898
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003899 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3900 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3901
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003902 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3903 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3904 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3905 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003906 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003907
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003908 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003909 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003910 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003911
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003912 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3913 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3914
3915 Example :
3916 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3917 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3918 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3919
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003920 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3921 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003922
3923
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003924reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3925reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003926 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3927 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3928 no | yes | yes | yes
3929 Arguments :
3930 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3931 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3932 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3933 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3934 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3935 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3936 case.
3937
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003938 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3939 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3940
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003941 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3942 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3943 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3944 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3945
3946 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3947 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3948
3949 Example :
3950 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3951 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3952 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3953 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3954
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003955 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3956 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003957
3958
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003959reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3960reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003961 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3962 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3963 no | yes | yes | yes
3964 Arguments :
3965 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3966 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3967 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3968 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3969 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3970 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3971
3972 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3973 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3974 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3975 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003976 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003977
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003978 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3979 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3980
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003981 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3982 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3983 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3984
3985 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3986 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3987 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3988 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3989 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3990
3991 Example :
3992 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3993 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3994 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3995 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3996
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003997 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3998 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003999
4000
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004001reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4002reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004003 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
4004 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4005 no | yes | yes | yes
4006 Arguments :
4007 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4008 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
4009 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
4010 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
4011 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
4012 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
4013 ignores case.
4014
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004015 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4016 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4017
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004018 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4019 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004020 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
4021 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
4022 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004023 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
4024 not set.
4025
4026 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
4027 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
4028 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
4029 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
4030 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
4031
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004032 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004033 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
4034 # block all others.
4035 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
4036 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
4037
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004038 # block bad guys
4039 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
4040 reqitarpit . if badguys
4041
4042 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
4043 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004044
4045
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02004046retries <value>
4047 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
4048 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4049 yes | no | yes | yes
4050 Arguments :
4051 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
4052 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
4053 default value is 3.
4054
4055 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
4056 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
4057 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
4058
4059 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
4060 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
4061
4062 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
4063 server even if a cookie references a different server.
4064
4065 See also : "option redispatch"
4066
4067
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004068rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004069 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
4070 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4071 no | yes | yes | yes
4072 Arguments :
4073 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4074 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004075 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004076
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004077 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4078 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4079
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004080 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
4081 the last header of an HTTP response.
4082
4083 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4084 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4085 responses.
4086
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004087 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
4088 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004089
4090
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004091rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4092rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004093 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
4094 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4095 no | yes | yes | yes
4096 Arguments :
4097 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4098 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4099 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4100 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4101 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4102 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
4103 ignores case.
4104
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004105 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4106 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4107
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004108 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
4109 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
4110 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
4111 client.
4112
4113 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4114 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4115 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
4116
4117 Example :
4118 # remove the Server header from responses
4119 reqidel ^Server:.*
4120
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004121 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4122 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004123
4124
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004125rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4126rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004127 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4128 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4129 no | yes | yes | yes
4130 Arguments :
4131 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4132 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4133 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4134 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4135 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4136 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4137 ignores case.
4138
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004139 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4140 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4141
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004142 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4143 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4144 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4145 case-sensitive.
4146
4147 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004148 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4149 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4150 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004151
4152 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4153 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4154
4155 Example :
4156 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4157 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4158
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004159 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4160 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004161
4162
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004163rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4164rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004165 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4166 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4167 no | yes | yes | yes
4168 Arguments :
4169 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4170 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4171 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4172 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4173 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4174 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4175 ignores case.
4176
4177 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4178 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4179 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4180 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004181 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004182
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004183 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4184 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4185
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004186 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4187 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4188 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4189
4190 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4191 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4192 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4193 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4194 are not case-sensitive.
4195
4196 Example :
4197 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4198 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4199
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004200 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4201 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004202
4203
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004204server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4205 Declare a server in a backend
4206 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4207 no | no | yes | yes
4208 Arguments :
4209 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4210 appear in logs and alerts.
4211
4212 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4213 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4214 start-up.
4215
4216 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4217 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4218 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4219 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4220 adding this value to the client's port.
4221
4222 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4223 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004224 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004225
4226 Examples :
4227 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4228 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4229
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004230 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004231
4232
4233source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004234source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004235source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004236 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4237 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4238 yes | no | yes | yes
4239 Arguments :
4240 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4241 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4242 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4243 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4244
4245 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4246 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004247 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4248 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4249 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004250
4251 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4252 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4253 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4254 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4255 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4256 <addr>.
4257
4258 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4259 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4260 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4261 port.
4262
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004263 <hdr> is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
4264 This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
4265 contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
4266 used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
4267 and to automatically bind to the the client's IP address as seen
4268 by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
4269 occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
4270 below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
4271 is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
4272 keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
4273 HTTP header.
4274
4275 <occ> is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
4276 header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
4277 in order to specificy which occurrence to use for the source IP
4278 address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
4279 occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
4280 positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
4281 is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
4282 at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
4283 proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
4284 assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.
4285
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004286 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4287 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4288 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4289 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4290 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4291 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4292
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004293 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4294 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4295 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4296 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4297
4298 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4299 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4300 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4301 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4302 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4303 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4304
4305 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4306 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4307 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4308 there are two methods :
4309
4310 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4311 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4312 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4313 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4314 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4315 of the client ranges may be used.
4316
4317 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4318 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4319 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4320 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4321 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4322 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4323 same session.
4324
4325 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4326 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4327 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4328 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4329 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4330 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4331
4332 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4333 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4334 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004335 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004336
4337 Examples :
4338 backend private
4339 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4340 source 192.168.1.200
4341
4342 backend transparent_ssl1
4343 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4344 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4345
4346 backend transparent_ssl2
4347 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4348 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4349 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4350
4351 backend transparent_ssl3
4352 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4353 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4354 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4355
4356 backend transparent_smtp
4357 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4358 # with Tproxy version 4.
4359 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4360
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004361 backend transparent_http
4362 # Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
4363 # proxy.
4364 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
4365
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004366 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004367 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4368
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004369
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004370srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4371 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4372 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4373 yes | no | yes | yes
4374 Arguments :
4375 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4376 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4377 as explained at the top of this document.
4378
4379 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4380 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4381 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4382 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4383 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4384 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4385 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4386
4387 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4388 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4389 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4390 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4391 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004392 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004393 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004394 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004395
4396 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4397 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4398 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4399 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4400 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4401 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4402
4403 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4404 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4405
4406 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4407
4408
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004409stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4410 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4411 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4412 yes | no | yes | yes
4413 Arguments :
4414 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4415
4416 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4417
4418 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4419 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4420 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4421 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4422 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4423 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4424
4425 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4426 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4427 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4428 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4429
4430 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4431 report using "stats scope".
4432
4433 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4434 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4435 unobvious parameters.
4436
4437 Example :
4438 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4439 backend public_www
4440 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4441 stats enable
4442 stats hide-version
4443 stats scope .
4444 stats uri /admin?stats
4445 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4446 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4447 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4448
4449 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4450 backend private_monitoring
4451 stats enable
4452 stats uri /admin?stats
4453 stats refresh 5s
4454
4455 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4456
4457
4458stats enable
4459 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4460 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4461 yes | no | yes | yes
4462 Arguments : none
4463
4464 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4465 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4466 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4467 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4468 - stats auth : no authentication
4469 - stats scope : no restriction
4470
4471 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4472 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4473 unobvious parameters.
4474
4475 Example :
4476 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4477 backend public_www
4478 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4479 stats enable
4480 stats hide-version
4481 stats scope .
4482 stats uri /admin?stats
4483 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4484 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4485 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4486
4487 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4488 backend private_monitoring
4489 stats enable
4490 stats uri /admin?stats
4491 stats refresh 5s
4492
4493 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4494
4495
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004496stats hide-version
4497 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004498 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4499 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004500 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004501
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004502 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4503 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4504 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4505 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4506 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4507 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004508
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004509 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4510 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4511 unobvious parameters.
4512
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004513 Example :
4514 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4515 backend public_www
4516 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004517 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004518 stats hide-version
4519 stats scope .
4520 stats uri /admin?stats
4521 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4522 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4523 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004524
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004525 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4526 backend private_monitoring
4527 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004528 stats uri /admin?stats
4529 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004530
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004531 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004532
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004533
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004534stats realm <realm>
4535 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4536 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4537 yes | no | yes | yes
4538 Arguments :
4539 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4540 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4541 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4542
4543 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4544 using a backslash ('\').
4545
4546 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4547 only related to authentication.
4548
4549 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4550 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4551 unobvious parameters.
4552
4553 Example :
4554 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4555 backend public_www
4556 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4557 stats enable
4558 stats hide-version
4559 stats scope .
4560 stats uri /admin?stats
4561 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4562 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4563 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4564
4565 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4566 backend private_monitoring
4567 stats enable
4568 stats uri /admin?stats
4569 stats refresh 5s
4570
4571 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4572
4573
4574stats refresh <delay>
4575 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4576 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4577 yes | no | yes | yes
4578 Arguments :
4579 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4580 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4581 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4582 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4583 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4584 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4585
4586 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4587 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4588 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4589 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4590
4591 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4592 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4593 unobvious parameters.
4594
4595 Example :
4596 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4597 backend public_www
4598 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4599 stats enable
4600 stats hide-version
4601 stats scope .
4602 stats uri /admin?stats
4603 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4604 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4605 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4606
4607 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4608 backend private_monitoring
4609 stats enable
4610 stats uri /admin?stats
4611 stats refresh 5s
4612
4613 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4614
4615
4616stats scope { <name> | "." }
4617 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4618 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4619 yes | no | yes | yes
4620 Arguments :
4621 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4622 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4623 section in which the statement appears.
4624
4625 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4626 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4627 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4628 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4629 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4630 exists.
4631
4632 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4633 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4634 unobvious parameters.
4635
4636 Example :
4637 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4638 backend public_www
4639 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4640 stats enable
4641 stats hide-version
4642 stats scope .
4643 stats uri /admin?stats
4644 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4645 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4646 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4647
4648 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4649 backend private_monitoring
4650 stats enable
4651 stats uri /admin?stats
4652 stats refresh 5s
4653
4654 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4655
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004656
4657stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4658 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4659 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4660 yes | no | yes | yes
4661
4662 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4663 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4664
4665 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4666 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4667
4668 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4669 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4670 unobvious parameters.
4671
4672 Example :
4673 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4674 backend private_monitoring
4675 stats enable
4676 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4677 stats uri /admin?stats
4678 stats refresh 5s
4679
4680 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4681 global section.
4682
4683
4684stats show-legends
4685 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4686 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4687 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4688 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4689 - IP (socket, server)
4690 - cookie (backend, server)
4691
4692 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4693 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4694 unobvious parameters.
4695
4696 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4697
4698
4699stats show-node [ <name> ]
4700 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4701 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4702 yes | no | yes | yes
4703 Arguments:
4704 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4705 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4706
4707 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4708 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4709 provided for each customer.
4710
4711 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4712 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4713 unobvious parameters.
4714
4715 Example:
4716 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4717 backend private_monitoring
4718 stats enable
4719 stats show-node Europe-1
4720 stats uri /admin?stats
4721 stats refresh 5s
4722
4723 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4724 section.
4725
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004726
4727stats uri <prefix>
4728 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4729 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4730 yes | no | yes | yes
4731 Arguments :
4732 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4733 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4734 query string.
4735
4736 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4737 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4738 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4739 possible to reach it in the application.
4740
4741 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004742 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004743 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4744 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4745 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4746 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4747
4748 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4749 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4750 an address or a port to statistics only.
4751
4752 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4753 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4754 unobvious parameters.
4755
4756 Example :
4757 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4758 backend public_www
4759 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4760 stats enable
4761 stats hide-version
4762 stats scope .
4763 stats uri /admin?stats
4764 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4765 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4766 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4767
4768 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4769 backend private_monitoring
4770 stats enable
4771 stats uri /admin?stats
4772 stats refresh 5s
4773
4774 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4775
4776
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004777stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4778 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004779 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004780 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004781
4782 Arguments :
4783 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4784 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4785 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4786 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4787
4788 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4789 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4790 the "stick-table" statement.
4791
4792 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4793 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4794 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4795 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4796 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4797
4798 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4799 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4800 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4801 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4802 transformation rules.
4803
4804 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4805 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4806 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4807 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4808 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4809 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4810 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4811
4812 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4813 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4814 ACL based conditions.
4815
4816 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4817 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4818 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4819 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4820
4821 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4822 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4823 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4824 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4825
4826 Example :
4827 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4828 # last 30 minutes
4829 backend pop
4830 mode tcp
4831 balance roundrobin
4832 stick store-request src
4833 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4834 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4835 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4836
4837 backend smtp
4838 mode tcp
4839 balance roundrobin
4840 stick match src table pop
4841 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4842 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4843
4844 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4845 extraction.
4846
4847
4848stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4849 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4850 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4851 no | no | yes | yes
4852
4853 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4854 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4855 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4856 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4857
4858 Examples :
4859 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004860 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004861
4862 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4863 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4864 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4865
4866
4867 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4868 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4869 backend http
4870 mode http
4871 balance roundrobin
4872 stick on src table https
4873 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4874 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4875 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4876
4877 backend https
4878 mode tcp
4879 balance roundrobin
4880 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4881 stick on src
4882 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4883 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4884
4885 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4886
4887
4888stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4889 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4890 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4891 no | no | yes | yes
4892
4893 Arguments :
4894 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4895 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4896 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4897 server is selected.
4898
4899 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4900 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4901 the "stick-table" statement.
4902
4903 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4904 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4905 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4906 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4907 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4908 address.
4909
4910 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4911 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4912 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4913 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4914 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4915 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4916 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4917 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4918 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4919 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4920
4921 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4922 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4923 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4924 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4925 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4926 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4927 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4928
4929 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4930 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4931 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4932 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4933
4934 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4935 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4936 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4937 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4938 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4939 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4940 another protocol or access method.
4941
4942 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4943 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4944 the request.
4945
4946 Example :
4947 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4948 # last 30 minutes
4949 backend pop
4950 mode tcp
4951 balance roundrobin
4952 stick store-request src
4953 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4954 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4955 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4956
4957 backend smtp
4958 mode tcp
4959 balance roundrobin
4960 stick match src table pop
4961 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4962 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4963
4964 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4965 extraction.
4966
4967
4968stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4969 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4970 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4971 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4972 no | no | yes | yes
4973
4974 Arguments :
4975 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4976 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4977 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4978 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4979
4980 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4981 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4982 instance.
4983
4984 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4985 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4986 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4987 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4988 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4989 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4990 to 31 characters.
4991
4992 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4993 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4994 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4995 increase.
4996
4997 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01004998 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
4999 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
5000 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01005001
5002 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
5003 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
5004 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
5005 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
5006 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
5007 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
5008 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
5009 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
5010 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
5011 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
5012 parameter (see below).
5013
5014 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
5015 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
5016 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
5017 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
5018 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
5019 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
5020 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
5021 if not expiration delay is specified.
5022
5023 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
5024 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
5025 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
5026 reference it.
5027
5028 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
5029 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
5030 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
5031 as an exclusive stickiness.
5032
5033 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
5034 about time format.
5035
5036
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005037tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
5038 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5039 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5040 no | yes | yes | no
5041
5042 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
5043 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5044 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5045 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5046 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5047 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5048 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5049 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5050
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005051 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005052 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5053
5054 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
5055 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
5056 "reject" statement.
5057
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005058 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005059
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005060 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005061
5062
5063tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
5064 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5065 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5066 no | yes | yes | no
5067
5068 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
5069 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5070 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5071 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5072 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5073 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5074 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5075 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5076
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005077 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005078 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5079
5080 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
5081 "accept".
5082
5083 Example:
5084 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
5085 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5086 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5087 tcp-request reject if content_present
5088
5089 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
5090 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5091 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5092 tcp-request accept if content_present
5093 tcp-request reject
5094
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005095 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005096
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005097 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005098
5099
5100tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
5101 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
5102 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5103 no | yes | yes | no
5104 Arguments :
5105 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5106 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5107 as explained at the top of this document.
5108
5109 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
5110 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
5111 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
5112 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
5113 data for at most the specified amount of time.
5114
5115 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
5116 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005117 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005118 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01005119 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
5120 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
5121 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
5122 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005123
5124 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
5125 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
5126 it pass through unaffected.
5127
5128 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
5129 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
5130 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005131 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005132 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
5133 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
5134 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
5135
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005136 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005137 "timeout client".
5138
5139
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005140timeout check <timeout>
5141 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
5142 established.
5143
5144 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5145 yes | no | yes | yes
5146 Arguments:
5147 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5148 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5149 as explained at the top of this document.
5150
5151 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5152 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5153 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5154 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005155 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5156 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5157 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005158
5159 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5160 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5161
5162 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5163 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005164 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005165
5166 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5167 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5168 forget about it.
5169
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005170 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5171 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005172
5173
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005174timeout client <timeout>
5175timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5176 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5177 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5178 yes | yes | yes | no
5179 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005180 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005181 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5182 as explained at the top of this document.
5183
5184 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5185 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5186 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5187 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5188 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5189 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5190 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5191 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005192 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005193 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5194 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5195
5196 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5197 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5198 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5199 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5200 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5201 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5202
5203 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5204 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5205 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5206
5207 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5208
5209
5210timeout connect <timeout>
5211timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5212 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5213 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5214 yes | no | yes | yes
5215 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005216 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005217 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5218 as explained at the top of this document.
5219
5220 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005221 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005222 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005223 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005224 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5225 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005226
5227 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5228 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5229 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5230 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5231 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5232 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5233
5234 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5235 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5236 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5237
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005238 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5239 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005240
5241
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005242timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5243 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5244 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5245 yes | yes | yes | yes
5246 Arguments :
5247 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5248 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5249 as explained at the top of this document.
5250
5251 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5252 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5253 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5254 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5255 once the request has started to present itself.
5256
5257 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5258 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5259 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5260 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5261 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5262
5263 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5264 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5265 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5266 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5267
5268 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5269 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5270 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5271 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5272 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02005273 with tens to hundreds of thousands of clients.
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005274
5275 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5276 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5277 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5278 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5279
5280 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5281
5282
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005283timeout http-request <timeout>
5284 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5285 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005286 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005287 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005288 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005289 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5290 as explained at the top of this document.
5291
5292 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5293 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5294 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5295 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5296 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5297 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5298 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5299 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5300
5301 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5302 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005303 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5304 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005305
5306 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5307 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5308 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5309 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5310 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5311
5312 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005313 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5314 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5315 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005316
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005317 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005318
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005319
5320timeout queue <timeout>
5321 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5322 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5323 yes | no | yes | yes
5324 Arguments :
5325 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5326 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5327 as explained at the top of this document.
5328
5329 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5330 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5331 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5332 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5333 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5334
5335 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5336 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5337 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5338 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5339
5340 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5341
5342
5343timeout server <timeout>
5344timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5345 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5346 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5347 yes | no | yes | yes
5348 Arguments :
5349 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5350 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5351 as explained at the top of this document.
5352
5353 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5354 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5355 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5356 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5357 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5358 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5359 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5360
5361 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5362 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5363 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5364 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5365 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005366 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005367 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005368 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005369
5370 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5371 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5372 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5373 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5374 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5375 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5376
5377 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5378 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5379 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5380
5381 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5382
5383
5384timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005385 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005386 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5387 yes | yes | yes | yes
5388 Arguments :
5389 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5390 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5391 as explained at the top of this document.
5392
5393 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5394 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5395 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5396
5397 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5398 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5399 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5400 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005401 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005402
5403 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5404
5405
5406transparent (deprecated)
5407 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5408 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005409 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005410 Arguments : none
5411
5412 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5413 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5414 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5415 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5416 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5417 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5418 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5419 appropriate server.
5420
5421 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5422
5423 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5424 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5425
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005426 See also: "option transparent"
5427
5428
5429use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5430use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005431 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005432 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5433 no | yes | yes | no
5434 Arguments :
5435 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5436
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005437 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005438
5439 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5440 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5441 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005442 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5443 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5444 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5445 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005446
5447 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5448 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5449 assign the backend.
5450
5451 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5452 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5453 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5454 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5455 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5456 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5457
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005458 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005459 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005460 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5461 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5462 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5463
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005464 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005465
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005466
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010054675. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005468------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005469
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005470The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5471which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5472arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5473settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5474after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5475Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5476address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005477
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005478 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005479 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005480
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005481The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005482
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005483addr <ipv4>
5484 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5485 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5486 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5487 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5488 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005489
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005490 Supported in default-server: No
5491
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005492backup
5493 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5494 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5495 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5496 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5497 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5498 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005499
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005500 Supported in default-server: No
5501
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005502check
5503 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5504 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5505 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5506 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5507 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5508 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5509 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5510 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5511 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005512 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5513 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005514
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005515 Supported in default-server: No
5516
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005517cookie <value>
5518 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5519 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5520 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5521 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5522 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5523 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5524 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5525
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005526 Supported in default-server: No
5527
Willy Tarreau96839092010-03-29 10:02:24 +02005528disabled
5529 The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
5530 that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
5531 ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
5532 new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
5533 possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
5534
5535 Supported in default-server: No
5536
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005537error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005538 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5539 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5540 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005541
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005542 Supported in default-server: Yes
5543
5544 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005545
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005546fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005547 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5548 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5549 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5550
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005551 Supported in default-server: Yes
5552
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005553id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005554 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5555 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5556 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005557
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005558 Supported in default-server: No
5559
5560inter <delay>
5561fastinter <delay>
5562downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005563 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5564 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5565 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5566 between checks depending on the server state :
5567
5568 Server state | Interval used
5569 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5570 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5571 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5572 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5573 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5574 or yet unchecked. |
5575 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5576 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5577 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005578
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005579 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5580 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5581 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5582 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5583 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5584 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5585 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5586 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5587 servers.
5588
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005589 Supported in default-server: Yes
5590
5591maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005592 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5593 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5594 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5595 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5596 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5597 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5598 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5599 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5600
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005601 Supported in default-server: Yes
5602
5603maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005604 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5605 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5606 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5607 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5608 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5609 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5610 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5611
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005612 Supported in default-server: Yes
5613
5614minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005615 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5616 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5617 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5618 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5619 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5620 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005621 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005622 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005623
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005624 Supported in default-server: Yes
5625
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005626observe <mode>
5627 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5628 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5629 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5630 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5631 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5632 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5633 headers, a timeout, etc.
5634
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005635 Supported in default-server: No
5636
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005637 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5638
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005639on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005640 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5641 Currently, four modes are available:
5642 - fastinter: force fastinter
5643 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5644 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5645 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5646 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5647
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005648 Supported in default-server: Yes
5649
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005650 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5651
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005652port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005653 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5654 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5655 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5656 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5657 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5658 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5659
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005660 Supported in default-server: Yes
5661
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005662redir <prefix>
5663 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5664 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5665 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5666 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5667 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5668 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5669 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5670 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005671 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005672 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5673 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5674 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5675 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5676 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5677
5678 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5679
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005680 Supported in default-server: No
5681
5682rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005683 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5684 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5685 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5686
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005687 Supported in default-server: Yes
5688
5689slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005690 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5691 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5692 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5693 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5694 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5695 parameters :
5696
5697 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5698 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5699
5700 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5701 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5702 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5703 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5704
5705 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5706 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5707 seen as failed.
5708
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005709 Supported in default-server: Yes
5710
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005711source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02005712source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005713source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005714 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5715 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5716 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5717 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5718
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005719 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5720 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5721 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5722 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5723 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5724 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5725 server.
5726
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005727 Supported in default-server: No
5728
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005729track [<proxy>/]<server>
5730 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5731 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5732 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5733 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5734 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5735
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005736 Supported in default-server: No
5737
5738weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005739 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5740 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5741 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005742 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5743 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5744 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5745 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5746 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5747 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005748
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005749 Supported in default-server: Yes
5750
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005751
57526. HTTP header manipulation
5753---------------------------
5754
5755In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5756response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5757request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5758which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5759against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5760to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5761passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5762headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5763never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5764
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005765There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5766(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5767rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5768messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5769in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005770happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005771add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5772normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5773
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005774This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5775in section 4.2 :
5776
5777 - reqadd <string>
5778 - reqallow <search>
5779 - reqiallow <search>
5780 - reqdel <search>
5781 - reqidel <search>
5782 - reqdeny <search>
5783 - reqideny <search>
5784 - reqpass <search>
5785 - reqipass <search>
5786 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5787 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5788 - reqtarpit <search>
5789 - reqitarpit <search>
5790 - rspadd <string>
5791 - rspdel <search>
5792 - rspidel <search>
5793 - rspdeny <search>
5794 - rspideny <search>
5795 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5796 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5797
5798With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5799is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5800parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5801prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5802Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5803
5804 \t for a tab
5805 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5806 \n for a new line (LF)
5807 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5808 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5809 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5810 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5811 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5812
5813The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5814portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5815above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5816regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
58179 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5818is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5819
5820The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5821after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5822
5823Notes related to these keywords :
5824---------------------------------
5825 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5826 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5827 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5828
5829 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5830 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5831 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5832
5833 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5834 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5835 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5836 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5837 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5838
5839 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5840 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5841 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5842 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5843 useless headers before adding new ones.
5844
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005845 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005846 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5847
5848 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5849 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5850 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5851
5852 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5853 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005854 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005855
5856
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010058577. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5858------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005859
5860The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5861content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5862from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5863simple :
5864
5865 - define test criteria with sets of values
5866 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5867
5868The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5869
5870In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5871
5872 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5873
5874This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5875Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5876and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5877an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5878of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5879
5880ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5881'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5882which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5883
5884There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5885performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5886
5887The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5888
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005889 -i : ignore case during matching of all subsequent patterns.
5890 -f : load patterns from a file.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005891 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5892
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005893The "-f" flag is special as it loads all of the lines it finds in the file
5894specified in argument and loads all of them before continuing. It is even
5895possible to pass multiple "-f" arguments if the patterns are to be loaded from
Willy Tarreau58215a02010-05-13 22:07:43 +02005896multiple files. Empty lines as well as lines beginning with a sharp ('#') will
5897be ignored. All leading spaces and tabs will be stripped. If it is absolutely
5898needed to insert a valid pattern beginning with a sharp, just prefix it with a
5899space so that it is not taken for a comment. Depending on the data type and
5900match method, haproxy may load the lines into a binary tree, allowing very fast
5901lookups. This is true for IPv4 and exact string matching. In this case,
5902duplicates will automatically be removed. Also, note that the "-i" flag applies
5903to subsequent entries and not to entries loaded from files preceeding it. For
5904instance :
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005905
5906 acl valid-ua hdr(user-agent) -f exact-ua.lst -i -f generic-ua.lst test
5907
5908In this example, each line of "exact-ua.lst" will be exactly matched against
5909the "user-agent" header of the request. Then each line of "generic-ua" will be
5910case-insensitively matched. Then the word "test" will be insensitively matched
5911too.
5912
5913Note that right now it is difficult for the ACL parsers to report errors, so if
5914a file is unreadable or unparsable, the most you'll get is a parse error in the
5915ACL. Thus, file-based ACLs should only be produced by reliable processes.
5916
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005917Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005918
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005919 - integers or integer ranges
5920 - strings
5921 - regular expressions
5922 - IP addresses and networks
5923
5924
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059257.1. Matching integers
5926----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005927
5928Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5929that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5930expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5931may be omitted.
5932
5933For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5934unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5935representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5936
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005937As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5938two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5939instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5940ranges and operators.
5941
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005942For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005943operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5944Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5945of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005946
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005947Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005948
5949 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5950 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5951 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5952 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5953 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5954
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005955For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005956
5957 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5958
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005959This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5960
5961 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5962
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005963
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059647.2. Matching strings
5965---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005966
5967String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5968exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5969characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5970string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5971to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005972before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005973
5974
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059757.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5976-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005977
5978Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5979they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5980possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5981passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5982the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005983the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5984match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005985
5986
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059877.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5988----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005989
5990IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5991netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5992within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005993host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005994difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5995at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5996does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5997parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005998
5999
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060007.5. Available matching criteria
6001--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006002
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060037.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
6004------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006005
6006A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
6007analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
6008addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
6009
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006010always_false
6011 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6012 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6013
6014always_true
6015 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6016 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6017
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006018avg_queue <integer>
6019avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
6020 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
6021 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
6022 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
6023 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
6024 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
6025 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
6026 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
6027 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
6028 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
6029 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
6030 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01006031
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006032be_conn <integer>
6033be_conn(frontend) <integer>
6034 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
6035 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
6036 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6037 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
6038 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006039
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006040be_sess_rate <integer>
6041be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
6042 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
6043 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
6044 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
6045 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
6046 sucking of an online dictionary).
6047
6048 Example :
6049 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
6050 backend dynamic
6051 mode http
6052 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
6053 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006054
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006055connslots <integer>
6056connslots(backend) <integer>
6057 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006058 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006059 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
6060
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006061 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
6062 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006063
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006064 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006065 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
6066 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
6067 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
6068 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
6069 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006070 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006071
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006072 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
6073 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
6074 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
6075 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006076
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006077dst <ip_address>
6078 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
6079 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006080
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006081dst_conn <integer>
6082 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
6083 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
6084 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
6085 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
6086 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
6087 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
6088
6089dst_port <integer>
6090 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
6091 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
6092
6093fe_conn <integer>
6094fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
6095 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
6096 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
6097 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6098 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
6099 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
6100 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
6101 criteria.
6102
6103fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01006104 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006105 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006106
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006107fe_sess_rate <integer>
6108fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
6109 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
6110 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
6111 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
6112 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
6113 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
6114 the rate to go down below the limit.
6115
6116 Example :
6117 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
6118 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
6119 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
6120 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
6121 frontend mail
6122 bind :25
6123 mode tcp
6124 maxconn 100
6125 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
6126 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
6127 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
6128 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006129
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006130nbsrv <integer>
6131nbsrv(backend) <integer>
6132 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
6133 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
6134 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
6135 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
6136 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006137
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006138queue <integer>
6139queue(frontend) <integer>
6140 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
6141 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
6142 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
6143 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
6144 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
6145 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
6146 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
6147
6148so_id <integer>
6149 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
6150
6151src <ip_address>
6152 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
6153 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
6154 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
6155
6156src_port <integer>
6157 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006158
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006159
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061607.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
6161-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006162
6163A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
6164during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
6165through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
6166for more detailed information on the subject.
6167
6168req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006169 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006170 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
6171 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
6172 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
6173 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
6174 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
6175 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
6176
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006177req_proto_http
6178 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
6179 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006180 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006181 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
6182 using TCP request content inspection rules.
6183
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006184req_rdp_cookie <string>
6185req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6186 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6187 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6188 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6189 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6190 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6191 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6192 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6193 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6194
6195req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6196req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6197 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6198 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6199 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6200 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6201 cookies.
6202
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006203req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6204 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6205 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6206 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6207 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6208 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6209 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6210 with TCP request content inspection.
6211
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006212wait_end
6213 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6214 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6215 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6216 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6217 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6218 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6219 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6220 inspection.
6221
6222 Examples :
6223 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6224 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6225 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6226
6227 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6228 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6229 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6230 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6231 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6232 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6233 tcp-request content reject
6234
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006235
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062367.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6237--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006238
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006239A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006240application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6241read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6242than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6243
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006244hdr <string>
6245hdr(header) <string>
6246 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6247 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6248 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6249 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6250 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6251
6252 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6253 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6254 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6255
6256 hdr(Connection) -i close
6257
6258hdr_beg <string>
6259hdr_beg(header) <string>
6260 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6261 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6262 response headers sent by the server.
6263
6264hdr_cnt <integer>
6265hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6266 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6267 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6268 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6269 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6270 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6271 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6272 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6273
6274hdr_dir <string>
6275hdr_dir(header) <string>
6276 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6277 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6278 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6279 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6280 headers sent by the server.
6281
6282hdr_dom <string>
6283hdr_dom(header) <string>
6284 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6285 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6286 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6287 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6288 server.
6289
6290hdr_end <string>
6291hdr_end(header) <string>
6292 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6293 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6294 response headers sent by the server.
6295
6296hdr_ip <ip_address>
6297hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6298 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6299 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6300 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6301 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6302
6303hdr_reg <regex>
6304hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6305 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6306 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6307 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6308 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6309 response headers sent by the server.
6310
6311hdr_sub <string>
6312hdr_sub(header) <string>
6313 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6314 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6315 response headers sent by the server.
6316
6317hdr_val <integer>
6318hdr_val(header) <integer>
6319 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6320 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6321 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6322 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6323
6324http_auth(userlist)
6325http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6326 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6327 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6328 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6329 of specified groups.
6330
6331 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6332
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006333method <string>
6334 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6335 already check for most common methods.
6336
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006337path <string>
6338 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6339 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6340 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6341
6342path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006343 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6344 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006345
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006346path_dir <string>
6347 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6348 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6349 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6350 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6351
6352path_dom <string>
6353 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6354 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6355 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6356
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006357path_end <string>
6358 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6359 control file name extension.
6360
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006361path_reg <regex>
6362 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6363 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6364 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6365
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006366path_sub <string>
6367 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6368 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6369 "path_dir".
6370
6371req_ver <string>
6372 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6373 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6374
6375status <integer>
6376 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6377 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6378 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6379
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006380url <string>
6381 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6382 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6383
6384url_beg <string>
6385 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6386 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6387
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006388url_dir <string>
6389 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6390 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6391 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6392 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6393
6394url_dom <string>
6395 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6396 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6397 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6398
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006399url_end <string>
6400 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6401 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006402
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006403url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006404 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6405 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006406 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006407
6408url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006409 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6410 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006411 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006412 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006413
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006414url_reg <regex>
6415 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6416 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6417 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006418
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006419url_sub <string>
6420 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6421 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006422
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006423
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064247.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6425---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006426
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006427Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6428every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02006429order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006430
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006431ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6432---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006433FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006434HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006435HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6436HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006437HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6438HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6439HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6440HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6441LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006442METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6443METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6444METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6445METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6446METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6447METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006448RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006449REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006450TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006451WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6452---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006453
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006454
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064557.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6456----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006457
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006458Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6459combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006460
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006461 - AND (implicit)
6462 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6463 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006464
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006465A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006466
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006467 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006468
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006469Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6470indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006471
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006472For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6473"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6474requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6475is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006476
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006477 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6478 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6479 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6480 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006481
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006482To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6483and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006484
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006485 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6486 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6487 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6488 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006489
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006490 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6491 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6492 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6493 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006494
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006495It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6496expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6497be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6498the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6499
6500 The following rule :
6501
6502 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6503 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6504
6505 Can also be written that way :
6506
6507 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6508
6509It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6510to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6511simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6512sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6513good use is the following :
6514
6515 With named ACLs :
6516
6517 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6518 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6519 monitor fail if site_dead
6520
6521 With anonymous ACLs :
6522
6523 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6524
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006525See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006526
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006527
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010065287.8. Pattern extraction
6529-----------------------
6530
6531The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6532response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6533for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6534
6535All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6536"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6537begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6538arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6539much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6540equivalent used in ACLs.
6541
6542The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6543
6544 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6545 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6546
6547 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6548 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6549 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6550 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6551
6552 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6553 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6554 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6555 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6556 type integer and only works with such tables.
6557
Willy Tarreau4a568972010-05-12 08:08:50 +02006558 hdr(name) This extracts the last occurrence of header <name> in an HTTP
6559 request and converts it to an IP address. This IP address is
6560 then used to match the table. A typical use is with the
6561 x-forwarded-for header.
6562
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006563
6564The currently available list of transformations include :
6565
6566 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6567 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6568 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6569
6570 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6571 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6572 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6573
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006574 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6575 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6576 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6577 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6578 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6579
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006580
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065818. Logging
6582----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006583
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006584One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6585provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6586very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6587provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6588state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006589to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006590headers.
6591
6592In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6593about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6594send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6595
6596 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6597 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6598 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6599 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6600 at the termination.
6601
6602The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6603allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6604as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6605while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6606real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6607delay.
6608
6609
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066108.1. Log levels
6611---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006612
6613TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6614source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6615HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6616in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6617particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006618syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006619facilities.
6620
6621
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066228.2. Log formats
6623----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006624
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006625HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006626and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6627the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6628formats are the following ones :
6629
6630 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6631 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6632 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6633 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6634 extents.
6635
6636 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6637 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6638 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6639 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6640 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6641
6642 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6643 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6644 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6645 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6646 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6647
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006648 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6649 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6650 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6651 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6652
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006653Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6654specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6655field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6656servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6657always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6658identifier.
6659
6660Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6661 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6662 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6663 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6664 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6665
6666
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066678.2.1. Default log format
6668-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006669
6670This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6671as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6672format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6673
6674 Example :
6675 listen www
6676 mode http
6677 log global
6678 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6679
6680 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6681 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6682 (www/HTTP)
6683
6684 Field Format Extract from the example above
6685 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6686 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6687 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6688 4 'to' to
6689 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6690 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6691
6692Detailed fields description :
6693 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6694 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6695 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6696 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6697 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6698 and processed the connection.
6699 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6700
6701It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6702will eventually disappear.
6703
6704
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067058.2.2. TCP log format
6706---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006707
6708The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6709is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6710information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6711counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6712emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6713environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6714the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6715sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006716specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6717not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6718fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6719marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006720
6721 Example :
6722 frontend fnt
6723 mode tcp
6724 option tcplog
6725 log global
6726 default_backend bck
6727
6728 backend bck
6729 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6730
6731 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6732 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6733 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6734
6735 Field Format Extract from the example above
6736 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6737 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6738 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6739 4 frontend_name fnt
6740 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6741 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6742 7 bytes_read* 212
6743 8 termination_state --
6744 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6745 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6746
6747Detailed fields description :
6748 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6749 connection to haproxy.
6750
6751 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6752
6753 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6754 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6755 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6756 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6757
6758 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6759 and processed the connection.
6760
6761 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6762 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6763 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6764 applications.
6765
6766 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6767 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6768 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6769 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6770 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6771
6772 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6773 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6774 See "Timers" below for more details.
6775
6776 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6777 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6778 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6779 "Timers" below for more details.
6780
6781 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6782 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6783 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6784 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6785 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6786 details.
6787
6788 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6789 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6790 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6791 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6792 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6793
6794 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6795 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6796 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6797 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6798 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6799 for more details.
6800
6801 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6802 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6803 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6804 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6805 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006806 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006807
6808 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6809 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6810 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6811 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6812 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6813 caused by a denial of service attack.
6814
6815 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6816 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6817 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6818 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6819 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6820 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6821 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6822 denial of service attack.
6823
6824 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6825 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6826 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6827 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6828 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6829 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6830 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6831 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6832 be processed than on other servers.
6833
6834 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6835 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6836 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6837 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6838 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6839 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6840 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6841 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6842 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6843 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6844 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6845 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6846 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6847
6848 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6849 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6850 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6851 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6852 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6853 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6854 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6855 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6856
6857 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6858 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6859 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6860 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6861 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6862 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6863 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6864 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6865 occurs.
6866
6867
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068688.2.3. HTTP log format
6869----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006870
6871The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6872is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6873the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6874are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6875emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6876generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6877"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6878which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006879frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6880is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006881
6882Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6883slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6884with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6885
6886 Example :
6887 frontend http-in
6888 mode http
6889 option httplog
6890 log global
6891 default_backend bck
6892
6893 backend static
6894 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6895
6896 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6897 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6898 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006899 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006900
6901 Field Format Extract from the example above
6902 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6903 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6904 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6905 4 frontend_name http-in
6906 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6907 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6908 7 status_code 200
6909 8 bytes_read* 2750
6910 9 captured_request_cookie -
6911 10 captured_response_cookie -
6912 11 termination_state ----
6913 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6914 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6915 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6916 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6917 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006918
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006919
6920Detailed fields description :
6921 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6922 connection to haproxy.
6923
6924 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6925
6926 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6927 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6928 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6929 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6930 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6931
6932 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6933 and processed the connection.
6934
6935 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6936 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6937 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6938
6939 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6940 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6941 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6942 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6943 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6944 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6945
6946 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6947 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6948 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6949 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6950 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6951 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6952
6953 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6954 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6955 See "Timers" below for more details.
6956
6957 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6958 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6959 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6960 below for more details.
6961
6962 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6963 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6964 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6965 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6966 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6967 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6968 for more details.
6969
6970 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6971 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6972 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6973 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6974 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6975 details.
6976
6977 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6978 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6979 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6980
6981 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6982 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6983 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6984 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6985 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6986 overflowing.
6987
6988 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6989 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6990 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6991 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6992 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6993 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6994 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6995 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6996
6997 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6998 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6999 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
7000 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
7001 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
7002 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
7003 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
7004 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7005
7006 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
7007 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
7008 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
7009 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
7010 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
7011 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
7012 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
7013
7014 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
7015 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
7016 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
7017 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
7018 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007019 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007020 system.
7021
7022 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
7023 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
7024 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
7025 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
7026 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
7027 caused by a denial of service attack.
7028
7029 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
7030 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
7031 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
7032 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
7033 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
7034 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
7035 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
7036 denial of service attack.
7037
7038 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
7039 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
7040 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
7041 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
7042 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
7043 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
7044 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
7045 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
7046 processed than on other servers.
7047
7048 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
7049 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
7050 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
7051 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
7052 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
7053 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
7054 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
7055 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
7056 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
7057 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
7058 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
7059 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
7060 should not be attributed to the logged server.
7061
7062 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7063 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
7064 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
7065 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
7066 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
7067 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
7068 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
7069 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
7070
7071 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7072 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
7073 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
7074 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
7075 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
7076 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
7077 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
7078 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
7079 occurs.
7080
7081 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
7082 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
7083 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
7084 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
7085 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
7086 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
7087 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
7088 cookies" below for more details.
7089
7090 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
7091 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
7092 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
7093 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
7094 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
7095 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
7096 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
7097 and cookies" below for more details.
7098
7099 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
7100 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
7101 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
7102 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
7103 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
7104 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
7105 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
7106 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
7107
7108
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071098.3. Advanced logging options
7110-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007111
7112Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
7113just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
7114options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
7115for more information about their usage.
7116
7117
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071188.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
7119------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007120
7121It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
7122haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
7123commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
7124monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
7125ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
7126
7127 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
7128 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
7129 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
7130 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
7131
7132 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
7133 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
7134 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
7135 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
7136 such as other load-balancers.
7137
7138 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
7139 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
7140 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
7141
7142
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071438.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
7144----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007145
7146The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
7147what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
7148or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
7149"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
7150just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
7151log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
7152after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
7153is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
7154with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
7155with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
7156
7157
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071588.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
7159------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007160
7161Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
7162for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
7163"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
7164retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
7165raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
7166a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
7167file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
7168you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
7169"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
7170
7171
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071728.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
7173--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007174
7175Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
7176multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
7177them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
7178"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
7179logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
7180error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
7181and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
7182too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
7183useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
7184alternative.
7185
7186
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071878.4. Timing events
7188------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007189
7190Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7191reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7192the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7193frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7194mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7195
7196 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7197 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7198 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7199 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7200 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7201
7202 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7203 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7204 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7205 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7206 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7207
7208 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7209 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7210 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7211 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7212 connection never established.
7213
7214 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7215 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7216 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7217 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7218 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7219 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7220 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7221 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7222 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7223 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7224 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7225
7226 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7227 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7228 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7229 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7230 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7231
7232 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7233
7234 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7235 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7236 negative.
7237
7238These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7239protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7240that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007241due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007242close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7243session has been aborted on timeout.
7244
7245Most common cases :
7246
7247 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7248 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7249 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7250 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7251 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7252 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7253 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7254 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7255 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7256 connections have been accepted at once.
7257
7258 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7259 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7260 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7261 of ms on remote networks.
7262
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007263 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7264 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7265 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007266
7267 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7268 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7269 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7270 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7271 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7272 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7273 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7274 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7275 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7276 to the server until another one is released.
7277
7278Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7279
7280 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7281 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7282 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7283
7284 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7285 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7286 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7287
7288 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7289 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7290 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7291 flags.
7292
7293 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7294 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7295 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7296 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7297 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7298 the client connection was maintained open.
7299
7300 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7301 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7302 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7303 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7304
7305
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073068.5. Session state at disconnection
7307-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007308
7309TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7310"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
73112-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7312each of which has a special meaning :
7313
7314 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7315 session to terminate :
7316
7317 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7318
7319 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7320 server explicitly refused it.
7321
7322 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7323 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7324 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7325 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7326 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7327 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7328
7329 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7330 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7331 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7332 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7333 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7334
7335 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7336 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7337 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7338 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7339 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7340
7341 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7342 send or receive data.
7343
7344 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7345 send or receive data.
7346
7347 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7348 with nothing left in the buffers.
7349
7350 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7351
7352 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7353 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7354
7355 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7356 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7357 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7358 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7359 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7360
7361 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7362 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7363
7364 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7365 server (HTTP only).
7366
7367 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7368
7369 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7370 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7371 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7372
7373 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7374 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7375 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7376
7377 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7378
7379 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7380 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7381
7382 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7383 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7384 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7385
7386 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7387 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02007388 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, persistence conditionally
7389 ignored, or an attack.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007390
7391 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7392 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7393 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7394 another server.
7395
7396 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7397 server.
7398
7399 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7400
7401 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7402 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7403
7404 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7405
7406 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7407 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7408 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7409
7410 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7411
7412 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7413 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7414
7415 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7416
7417 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7418
7419The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7420happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7421helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7422starvation, attacks, etc...
7423
7424The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7425alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7426easier finding and understanding.
7427
7428 Flags Reason
7429
7430 -- Normal termination.
7431
7432 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7433 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7434 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7435 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7436
7437 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7438 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7439 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7440 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7441 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7442 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007443
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007444 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7445 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7446 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7447
7448 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7449 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7450 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7451
7452 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7453 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7454 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7455 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7456 the server takes too long to respond.
7457
7458 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7459 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7460 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7461 long a time to respond.
7462
7463 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7464 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7465 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7466 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7467 and the client.
7468
7469 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7470 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7471 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7472 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7473 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7474 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7475
7476 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7477 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007478 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7479 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7480 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7481 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007482
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007483 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007484 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7485 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7486 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7487 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7488 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7489
7490 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7491 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7492 503 or 504 here.
7493
7494 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7495 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7496 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7497 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7498 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7499
7500 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7501 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007502 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007503 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7504 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7505
7506 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7507 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7508 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7509 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7510 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7511 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7512 between haproxy and the server.
7513
7514 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7515 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7516 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7517 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7518 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7519 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7520 solution is to fix the application.
7521
7522 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7523 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7524 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7525 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7526 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7527 external attacks.
7528
7529 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7530 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7531 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7532 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7533 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7534
7535 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7536 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7537 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7538 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7539 containing unauthorized characters.
7540
7541 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7542 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7543 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7544 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7545
7546 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7547 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7548 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7549 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7550
7551 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7552 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7553 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7554 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7555
7556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075578.6. Non-printable characters
7558-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007559
7560In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7561consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7562converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7563prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7564being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7565escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7566is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7567'}' when logging headers.
7568
7569Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7570issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7571containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7572
7573Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7574the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7575performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7576
7577
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075788.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7579---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007580
7581Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7582achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007583section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007584cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7585the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7586the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007587locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007588not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7589user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7590a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7591wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7592
7593 Examples :
7594 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7595 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7596
7597 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7598 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7599
7600
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076018.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7602---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007603
7604Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7605proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7606the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7607server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7608
7609Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7610response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007611section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007612
7613It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007614time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7615appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007616are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7617and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7618follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7619request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7620in the logs.
7621
7622 Example :
7623 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7624 listen proxy-out
7625 mode http
7626 option httplog
7627 option logasap
7628 log global
7629 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7630
7631 # log the name of the virtual server
7632 capture request header Host len 20
7633
7634 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7635 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7636
7637 # log the beginning of the referrer
7638 capture request header Referer len 20
7639
7640 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7641 capture response header Server len 20
7642
7643 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7644 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7645
7646 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7647 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7648
7649 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7650 capture response header Via len 20
7651
7652 # log the URL location during a redirection
7653 capture response header Location len 20
7654
7655 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7656 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7657 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7658 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7659 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7660
7661 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7662 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7663 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7664 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007665 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007666
7667 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7668 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7669 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7670 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7671 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007672 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007673
7674
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076758.9. Examples of logs
7676---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007677
7678These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7679them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7680reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7681
7682 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7683 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7684 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7685
7686 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7687 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7688
7689 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7690 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7691 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7692
7693 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7694 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7695
7696 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7697 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7698 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7699
7700 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007701 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007702 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7703 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7704
7705 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7706 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7707 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7708
7709 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7710 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7711 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7712 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7713 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7714 to return the 502 and not the server.
7715
7716 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007717 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007718
7719 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7720 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7721 Nothing was sent to any server.
7722
7723 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7724 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7725
7726 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7727 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7728 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7729 send a 408 return code to the client.
7730
7731 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7732 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7733
7734 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7735 5 seconds ("c----").
7736
7737 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7738 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007739 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007740
7741 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007742 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007743 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7744 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7745 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7746 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7747 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007748
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007749
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077509. Statistics and monitoring
7751----------------------------
7752
7753It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7754mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7755CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7756Unix socket.
7757
7758
77599.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007760---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007761
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007762The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7763page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7764
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007765 0. pxname: proxy name
7766 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7767 for server)
7768 2. qcur: current queued requests
7769 3. qmax: max queued requests
7770 4. scur: current sessions
7771 5. smax: max sessions
7772 6. slim: sessions limit
7773 7. stot: total sessions
7774 8. bin: bytes in
7775 9. bout: bytes out
7776 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007777 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007778 12. ereq: request errors
7779 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007780 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007781 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7782 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007783 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007784 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7785 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7786 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7787 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7788 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7789 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7790 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7791 25. qlimit: queue limit
7792 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7793 27. iid: unique proxy id
7794 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7795 29. throttle: warm up status
7796 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7797 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007798 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007799 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7800 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7801 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007802 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007803 UNK -> unknown
7804 INI -> initializing
7805 SOCKERR -> socket error
7806 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7807 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7808 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7809 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7810 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7811 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7812 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7813 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7814 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7815 disable-on-404
7816 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7817 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7818 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007819 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7820 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007821 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7822 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7823 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7824 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7825 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7826 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007827 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7828 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7829 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7830 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007831 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7832 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007833
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007834
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020078359.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007836-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007837
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007838The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007839must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7840is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7841a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7842risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7843followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7844given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7845then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7846to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007847
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007848It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7849on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7850own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007851
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007852clear counters
7853 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7854 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7855 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7856 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7857 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7858
7859clear counters all
7860 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7861 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7862 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7863
7864disable server <backend>/<server>
7865 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7866 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7867 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7868 during the maintenance.
7869
7870 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7871 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7872
7873 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7874 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7875
7876 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7877 level "admin".
7878
7879enable server <backend>/<server>
7880 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7881 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7882
7883 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7884 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7885
7886 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7887 level "admin".
7888
7889get weight <backend>/<server>
7890 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7891 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7892 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7893 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7894 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7895 dash ('#').
7896
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007897help
7898 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7899 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007900
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007901prompt
7902 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7903 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7904 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7905 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7906 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7907 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7908 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7909 command.
7910
7911quit
7912 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007913
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007914set timeout cli <delay>
7915 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7916 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7917 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7918
7919set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7920 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7921 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7922 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7923 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7924 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7925 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7926 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7927 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7928 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7929 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7930 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7931 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7932 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7933 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7934
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007935show errors [<iid>]
7936 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7937 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007938 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7939 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7940 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007941
7942 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7943 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7944 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7945 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7946 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7947 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7948 are reported too.
7949
7950 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7951 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7952 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7953 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7954 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7955 code.
7956
7957 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7958 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7959 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7960 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7961 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7962 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7963 line.
7964
7965 Example :
7966 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7967 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7968 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7969 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7970
7971 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7972 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7973 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7974 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7975 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7976 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7977 00204+ minal\r\n
7978 00211 \r\n
7979
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007980 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007981 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7982 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7983 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7984 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7985 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7986 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007987
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007988show info
7989 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7990
7991show sess
7992 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007993 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7994 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7995
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01007996show sess <id>
7997 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
7998 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
7999 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
8000 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
8001 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
8002 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008003
8004show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
8005 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
8006 possible to dump only selected items :
8007 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
8008 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
8009 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
8010 for example:
8011 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
8012 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
8013 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
8014
8015 Example :
8016 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
8017 Name: HAProxy
8018 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
8019 Release_date: 2009/09/23
8020 Nbproc: 1
8021 Process_num: 1
8022 (...)
8023
8024 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
8025 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
8026 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
8027 (...)
8028 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
8029
8030 $
8031
8032 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
8033 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
8034 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
8035 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01008036 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008037
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02008038
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01008039/*
8040 * Local variables:
8041 * fill-column: 79
8042 * End:
8043 */